300
O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L
2 0 1 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 85
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................209
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................305
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 399
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................421
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................485
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 505
10
INDEX
...................................................................515
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ............ 12
▫ KeyFOB ........................... 13
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition ......... 14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 .......................... 16
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 17
▫ General Information ................... 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫ Rearming Of The System ................ 18
▫ To Arm The System ................... 18
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 19
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ........... 20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors .................. 21
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 24
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk .................. 25
2
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 25
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 26
▫ General Information ................... 27
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 28
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 30
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 30
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 32
▫ Passive Entry System — If Equipped ....... 35
▫ Child Protection Door Lock .............. 37
䡵 Windows ............................ 40
▫ Power Windows ...................... 40
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 43
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ................. 43
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning ................... 44
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ............... 44
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 45
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 46
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 52
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped ....................... 52
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 53
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 53
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 55
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 55
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbags ............................ 56
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 62
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 69
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 71
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 80
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 81
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 81
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 81
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 82
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 84
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Keyless Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re-
leased from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the RUN position.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry/
Keyless Go (PEKG), the Key Fob will also contain a
special receiver that communicates with the vehicle.
Passive Entry/Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used
with Passive Entry/Keyless Go equipped vehicles. Non-
Passive Entry/Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used
with Non-Passive Entry/Keyless Go vehicles.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove
box. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — RUN
4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
With the Passive Entry/Keyless Go system, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 min-
utes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Go in
the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder
chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go, always
remember to place the ignition in OFF.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch (and
Keyless Go Start/Stop button) for unauthorized opera-
tion. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide
the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instru-
ment cluster will flash.
Rearming of the System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm the System
Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not
illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In
addition, if you open a door during the arming period,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro-
cess. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after
closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-
described arming sequences.
Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go
Press the Keyless Go Start/Stop button until the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates that
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle ignition is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to “Starting Proce-
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion). Then either press the power door LOCK switch
while the driver or passenger door is open, press the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK button or
press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button (refer
to “Door Locks” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for
further information).
To Disarm the System
Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
•
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the
ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to
“Door Locks” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for
further information), press the Keyless Go Start/Stop
button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle),
or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch (if the
Start/Stop button is removed) and rotate it to the RUN
position.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or unlock any
door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under “Door
Locks” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Key Fob with RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
security alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm armed will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. When this
feature is turned on and the vehicle is equipped with the
Passive Entry system, using the Passive Entry system to
LOCK the vehicle will cause the parking lights to flash.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the security alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
When this feature is turned on and the vehicle is
equipped with the Passive Entry system, using the Pas-
sive Entry system to UNLOCK the vehicle will cause the
parking lights to flash.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under “Door
Locks” for further information.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter, or locked using the
Passive Entry door handle lock button (if equipped). This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re-
moved.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the security alarm.
To Unlatch the Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under “Door
Locks” for further information.
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
switch in the ACC or RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the RKE transmitter. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver
into the slot and gently pry open the access door.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
Battery Replacement
1— Battery Access Door
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while
still maintaining security. The system has a
range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Trunk closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go, the
remote start feature will operate with the Start/Stop
button installed in the ignition switch.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the RUN position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
switch to the RUN position.
Vehicles Equipped with Passive Entry
Use the Passive Entry feature to unlock the vehicle, press
the Start/Stop button one time if the Keyless Go Start/
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Stop button is installed in the ignition switch, otherwise,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn to the
RUN position. Refer to the “Passive Entry System — If
Equipped” under “Door Locks” for more information.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to
drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will display in the
EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once inserted, the
message “Turn To On” will display in the EVIC until
you turn the Key Fob to ON.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
message “Push Button/Insert Key” will display in the
EVIC until you push the START button.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Make sure the key is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in
the ACC or RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, ACC or RUN position and any front
door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob, returning the ignition
mode to the OFF position, or closing the door will allow
the locks to operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in
the ignition OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as
a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder
chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further details.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
Power Door Lock Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition
switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and
then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF
position (do not start engine).
3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four
for the feature to be enabled or disabled.
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and
then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF
position (do not start engine).
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Passive Entry System — If Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This fea-
ture allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
•
If a passive entry door handle has not been used for
72 hours the passive entry feature for that handle may
time out. Also, if it has been raining on a passive entry
door handle for 24 hours, that door handle’s passive
entry feature may be deactivated. Pulling the deacti-
vated front door handle will reactivate that door
handle’s passive entry feature.
•
If wearing hand gloves, the Passive Entry door handle
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s side of the vehicle, grab the front
driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automati-
cally.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger side of the vehicle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the
door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed, the vehicle checks the
passenger compartment for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected, the Passive Entry System auto-
matically unlocks ALL vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the
vehicle).
To Enter the Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the left side of
CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
located on the deck lid.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock the Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on
the outside of the handle, with one of the vehicle’s
Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s side, press the driver’s door handle LOCK
button to lock all four doors.
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger side, press the
passenger’s door handle LOCK button to lock all four
doors.
NOTE:
•
After an outside handle lock cycle, the system will not
allow a passive entry to unlock the same door for two
seconds. However, the RKE unlock function will work
during this time period.
•
The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)
into the child lock control and pull it upward.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: For emergency key information, refer to “A
Word About Your Keys”.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
•
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child Lock Control
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)
into the child lock control and pull it downward.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
Child Lock Control
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or RUN position.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power win-
dow switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Power Window Switches
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in
the ACC or RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO-
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button (setting it in the
DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
the UP position).
Reset
Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead,
the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the
AUTO-up feature, perform the following procedure after
vehicle power is restored:
Window Lockout Switch
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds.
With the ignition switch in the RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Trunk Release
Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-
bol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Passive Entry — If Equipped” under “Door
Locks” in this section for more information on trunk
operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
Trunk Emergency Release
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
— if equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems. For more information on
LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack from Belt
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and younger should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of
starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passen-
ger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warn-
ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is
folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de-
activating the BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except RUN or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position, but do
not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light
to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as
long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air-
bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE:
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Airbag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
(Continued)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain airbag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air-
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
if equipped, as required, depending on the severity and
type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position,
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away by an authorized dealer.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Differ-
ent airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power, until the ignition key is re-
moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using
the Keyless Go Start/Stop button.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first placed into the RUN position.
•
The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the ap-
proximate six to eight-second interval.
•
The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Vehicle speed
•
Engine RPM
•
Brake switch status
•
Pedal position
•
And other parameters depending on vehicle
configuration
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)”.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-
cle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally and pull it tight if necessary.
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”. A locking clip
should not be necessary once the automatic locking
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten web-
bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by de-
pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
the retractor.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 91
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 91
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 92
▫ Outside Mirrors ...................... 92
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
— If Equipped ....................... 93
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror
— If Equipped ....................... 93
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped ......... 93
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped ...... 94
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 94
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 95
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 96
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped ........... 96
▫ Operation .......................... 98
▫ Phone Call Features .................. 106
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 109
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 114
3
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 116
▫ General Information .................. 124
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 124
▫ Voice Command System Operation ........ 124
▫ Commands ........................ 126
▫ Voice Training ...................... 129
䡵 Seats .............................. 129
▫ Power Seats ........................ 130
▫ Power Reclining Seats ................. 131
▫ Lumbar Support ..................... 132
▫ Head Restraints ..................... 132
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 134
▫ Folding Rear Seat .................... 136
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ........ 138
▫ Programming The Memory Feature ....... 139
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory ........... 139
▫ Memory Position Recall ................ 140
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) ................... 141
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 142
䡵 Lights ............................. 144
▫ Headlight Switch .................... 144
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 145
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 145
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlight Time Delay ................. 145
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped ............ 146
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 147
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 147
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 147
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 148
▫ Turn Signals ........................ 148
▫ Lane Change Assist ................... 148
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ............... 149
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 149
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights .... 149
▫ Interior Lights ...................... 149
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 150
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 151
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 152
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 152
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 152
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....... 153
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 154
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
— If Equipped ........................ 155
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped .......... 156
䡵 Electronic Speed Control ................ 158
▫ To Activate ......................... 159
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed .............. 159
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 160
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 160
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 160
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 161
䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
— If Equipped ........................ 162
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 164
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 164
▫ To Activate ......................... 165
▫ To Set a Desired ACC Speed ............ 166
▫ To Cancel .......................... 167
▫ ToTurnOff ........................ 168
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 168
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 168
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .... 170
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ..... 172
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ....... 175
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC ...... 178
▫ General Information .................. 181
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode ............................. 182
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist .............. 184
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions ...... 186
䡵 Overhead Console ..................... 189
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 189
▫ Sunglasses Storage ................... 189
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 190
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 191
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 194
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 194
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button ............................ 195
▫ Security ........................... 195
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 195
▫ General Information .................. 196
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 196
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 197
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 197
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 198
▫ Pinch Protect Override ................ 198
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 198
▫ Sunshade Operation .................. 198
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 199
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 199
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 199
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed .................. 199
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 200
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 203
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ................. 203
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ................. 203
䡵 Storage ............................. 204
▫ Console Features .................... 204
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
▫ CargoArea ........................ 205
䡵 Cargo Area Features ................... 206
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped .............. 206
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 206
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 206
䡵 Load Leveling System — If Equipped ....... 207
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward the wind-
shield).
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s
side when equipped with turn signal and approach
lighting.
Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal and Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth (uppermost) LED supplies illuminated entry
lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when you use
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any
door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front
and rear door handles. It also shines downward to
illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when
the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the
customer-programmable features in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the power mirrors to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Power Mirror Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ve r-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone button) and
(Voice Command button) that will en-
able you to access the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
the
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a
press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
call, press and hold the button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
Uconnect™ Phone System to allow use of this vehicle
feature in emergency situations, when the cellular
phone has network coverage and stays paired to the
Uconnect™ Phone System.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the
button and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you
could press the
button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the
button and
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice
Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Phone Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
Menu”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language German”
•
“Language Dutch”
•
“Language Italian”
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Power Seats
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the
driver’s seat up or down, forward or rearward or to
recline the seat. The passenger’s seat will move up or
down, forward or rearward.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switch
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Reclining Seats
The recline control is used to adjust the position of the
seatback. To adjust the seatback forward, move the
control toward the front of the vehicle. To move the
seatback rearward, move the control toward the rear of
the vehicle.
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
Power Seat Recline Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
Lumbar Support Control Lever
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: The rear head restraints are not adjustable.
To remove the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint to it’s highest position, push in both buttons at
the base of each head restraint rod, and simultaneously
pull up on the head restraint.
Adjustable Head Restraints Removing Head Restraint
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
To install the head restraint, insert the head restraint rods
into each guide, apply pressure down on the headrest
until the head restraint reaches the first lock position,
push the large button in and push down and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
NOTE: Ensure that the front of the head restraint is
facing toward the front of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The controls for each front seat are located near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.
Front Heated Seat Switch
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
After turning the ignition to RUN, you can choose from
a High or Low heat setting. Amber indicator lights in
each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indica-
tors will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If the High-level heating is selected, the system will
automatically switch to Low-level heating after approxi-
mately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time,
the number of indicators illuminated changes from two
to one, indicating the change. Operation on the Low-level
setting also turns Off automatically after approximately
30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Folding Rear Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi-
tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE:
•
Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
•
Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the
memory function. Use either the memory recall switch
or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory
feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s door trim
panel. The switch contains an (S) button to activate the
memory save function. It also contains a rocker switch
labeled with the number (1) and the number (2). The
rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the appro-
priate side of the switch.
Memory Switch
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY
button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped) will display which memory position
has been set.
NOTE:
•
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
•
The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
can be enabled through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter to Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Go™).
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press and
release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2
accordingly. ⬙Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in
the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed
by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if
equipped).
•
The driver’s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall
memory positions.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side
mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop mov-
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recall
can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go™).
•
When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Go™), the driver seat will move about 2.4 in
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN
position.
•
When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Go™), the driver seat will move to a position
0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver
seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 mm and
67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return
to its previously set position when you place the
ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Catch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
Headlight Switch
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to “Mul-
tifunction Lever” for further information.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
SmartBeam™ system.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
to the on position.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the
RUN position, the headlights are off and the parking
brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for
normal nighttime driving.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or
turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the in-
strument panel lights and, if
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets and
cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position. The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to select the desired delay interval. There are
six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a
maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Mist Feature
Lightly push the multifunction lever inward (toward the
steering column) to activate a single wipe cycle to clear
off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers
will continue to operate until you release the multifunc-
tion lever.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
completely (toward the steering column) and hold it for
as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the six
intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive.
Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose
setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose
setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. The rain sense
wipers will automatically change between an intermit-
tent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the
amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield.
Place the multifunction lever in the off position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•
Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
•
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the transmission shift lever is in the NEU-
TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than
5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
•
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on.
One of the following messages will display in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped) if a pedal adjustment is attempted when the
system is locked out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled —
Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Dis-
abled — Vehicle In Reverse.”
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the right-
side of the steering wheel, operates the system.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button, located on the end
of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate and the cluster
will display a “Cruise ON” message to show that the
speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push
and release the ON/OFF button again. The system,
indicator light and message will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever downward to SET DECEL and release, the cluster
will display the “Cruise Set” message. Remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at
the selected speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE:
•
Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if
equipped).
•
The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a
different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the
compact spare tire.
To Deactivate
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
•
Softly tap the brake pedal.
•
Press the brake pedal.
•
Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you
(CANCEL).
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
increase. Each time the lever is tapped speed increases, so
tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL. If the lever
is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the set
speed will continue to until the lever is released. Release
the lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new
set speed will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE-
CEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climb-
ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes an infrared
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while matching
the speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in an accident or serious personal injury.The
ACC system:
•
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (i.e., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
•
Does not predict the lane curvature or the move-
ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen-
sate for such changes.
•
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
•
May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light
(for example, sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle.
•
Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s
braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
•
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
(i.e., in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes; and when towing a trailer.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
•
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
•
Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section. Note: The system will not react to
preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the control lever. The
two control modes function differently. Always confirm
which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control lever (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
25 mph (40 km/h).
1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME/ACCEL
4 — ON/OFF/MODE
5 — SET/DECEL
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-
plays “ACC READY.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “CRUISE
OFF.”
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
•
When you apply the brakes.
•
When the parking brake is set.
•
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
•
When the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
switched off.
•
When pushing the RESUME/ACCEL switch without a
previously set speed in memory.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF/MODE button located on
the end of the speed control lever. The ACC menu in the
EVIC displays “ACC READY.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF/
MODE button again. At this time, the system will turn off
and the EVIC will display “CRUISE OFF.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an accident.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set a Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever downward (SET/DECEL) and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
•
You softly tap the brake pedal.
•
You depress the brake pedal.
•
You pull the speed control lever toward you to CAN-
CEL.
•
The Electronic Stability Program/Traction Control
System (ESP/TCS) activates.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•
You push and release the ON/OFF/MODE button.
•
You turn OFF the ignition.
•
You switch off ESP.
To Resume Speed
Push the lever upward (RESUME/ACCEL) and release.
Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
EVIC will display the last set speed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This
could cause an accident and/or serious injury.
To Vary the Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by lifting
and holding the lever up (RESUME/ACCEL). If the lever
is continually held, the set speed will continue to increase
in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
Tapping the lever up once will result in a 1 mph (1 km/h)
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever
results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing and holding the lever down (SET/DECEL). If
the lever is continually held, the set speed will continue
to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever
is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
EVIC display.
Tapping the lever down once will result ina1mph
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
NOTE:
•
When you use the lever to decelerate, if the engine’s
braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to
reach the set speed, the brake system will automati-
cally slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Setting the Following Distance in ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between long, medium, and
short. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead.
This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
To change the distance setting, push the lever away from
you (DISTANCE) and release. Each time this is done, the
distance setting adjusts between long, medium, and
short.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
1 — Sensor Bars. Default Distance Setting is Three Bars = Long.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
itself.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“ATTENTION” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immedi-
ately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press the MENU button (located on the steer-
ing wheel) repeatedly until one of the follow-
ing displays in the EVIC:
CRUISE OFF
−
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“CRUISE OFF.”
ACC READY
−
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “ACC
READY.”
Menu
Button
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC SET
−
When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
1 — Sensed Vehicle Indicator
2 — Set Speed
3 — Your Vehicle
4 — Following Distance Setting: Three Bars = Long; Two Bars =
Medium; One Bar = Short.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
The ACC SET screen will display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•
Set speed change
•
Distance setting change
•
System cancel
•
Acquisition/loss of Target
•
Driver override
•
System off
•
Proximity warning
•
ACC warning
The EVIC will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Display Warnings and Maintenance
ACC Blinded Warning
The ACC Blinded Warning will display when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow, fog,
heavy rain, or when driving into direct sunlight (sunrise
or sunset). The ACC system may also become tempo-
rarily blinded due to obstructions, such as dirt or ice. In
these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC Blinded” and
the system will deactivate.
NOTE: If the ACC Blinded Warning is active Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For addi-
tional information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the grille,
slightly offset from the center of the grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor or the
sensor mount. Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor realign-
ment.
•
If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, see your
authorized dealer for service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “CRUISE
OFF” state and will resume function by simply reactivat-
ing it.
ACC Sensor Location
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays ⬙ACC
UNAVAILABLE,⬙ there may be a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see
your authorized dealer.
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “SERVICE
ACC,” it indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Precautions While Driving with ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding a Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a hitch, such as reduced
detection range, please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns and Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-
ary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Using ACC on Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects and Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
Classification Specifications:
21 C.F.R part 1040.10 & 1040.11
DIN EN 60825-1:2003
IEC 60825-1:2001
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to adaptive cruise control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) cruise control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal cruise control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir-
ing the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
To change modes, press and hold the ON/OFF/MODE
button for at least one second in either the OFF state or
the READY state. ⬙Normal Cruise Ready⬙ will be dis-
played once the mode becomes available. To switch back
to ACC, press and hold the ON/OFF/MODE button
again for at least one second.
WARNING!
In the normal cruise control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, tap the lever
down and release (SET/DECEL). The EVIC will display
the set speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary the Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
•
Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and push the lever down (SET/DECEL).
•
Tap the stalk up (ACCEL) or down (DECEL) to
increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph (1 km/h)
increments respectively. Hold the lever up (ACCEL) or
down (DECEL) for 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable Normal cruise control without
erasing the memory if:
•
You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
•
You pull the speed control lever toward you (CAN-
CEL).
•
The Electronic Stability Program/Traction Control
System (ESP/TCS) activates.
To Resume
Push the lever up and release (RESUME/ACCEL) and
then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
EVIC will display the last set speed.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•
You push and release the ON/OFF/MODE button.
•
You turn off the ignition.
•
You switch off ESP.
If the cruise control system is turned off and reactivated,
the system will return to the Vehicle-to-vehicle (adaptive)
distance control mode.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is a driver aid
that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to
ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense威 is active when the driver shifts the transmis-
sion into the REVERSE position, and the parking brake is
not applied, and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
ParkSense威 can be turned on or off through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
PARK. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ParkSense威 uses four sensors located in the rear bumper
to scan for obstacles up to 79 in (200 cm) away from the
rear bumper fascia. The ParkSense威 Warning Display
located above the rear window provides both visible and
audible warnings to indicate the range of the object.
ParkSense威 LED Display
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Warning Display contains two sets of yellow and red
indicators, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left
rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles
behind the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view
the indicators either through the rearview mirror or by
looking at the display above the rear window.
ParkSense威 dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow
indicators when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY INDICA-
TOR
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: INDICATOR
COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
Inner LED 79 in (200 cm) Yellow Yes, Half Second
1st LED 51.2 in (130 cm) Yellow No
2nd LED 45.3 in (115 cm) Yellow No
3rd LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39.3 in (100 cm) Yellow No
4th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow No
5th LED 20 in (50 cm) 27.6 in (70 cm) Yellow No
6th LED 16 in (40 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) Red Yes, Intermittent
7th LED 6 in (15 cm) 11.8 in (30 cm) Red Yes, Continuous
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 Rear Park
Assist system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense威 Rear Park
Assist system.
•
When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
•
If a ParkSense威 system malfunction occurs, a single
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” and the
LED in the ParkSense威 switch will illuminate. If this
occurs after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other
obstruction, see your authorized dealer for service.
•
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.
Failure to do so can result in ParkSense威 not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
•
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system to be able to
stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense威.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the ParkSense威 sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) buttons and power sunroof switch
may also be included, if equipped.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, when the Passive Entry door
handle is used (refer to “Passive Entry” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion) or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward,
past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–
3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld trans-
mitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC
display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Controls
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Go™). Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. If this occurs remove
the obstruction and press the switch forward and release
to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
toward the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent”, which operates regardless
of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time is program-
mable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by
a fuse.
Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has
power available only when the ignition is placed in the
ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
Front Power Outlet
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Center Console Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows.
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins
with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles
not equipped with navigation radio, the console also
contains an extra storage bin located below the climate
control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the armrest.
1 — Release button for bottom compartment
2 — Release button for top compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment. (You can access this compartment
directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by oper-
ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the
armrest down.)
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also con-
tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder
(designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and
right side of the top compartment provides clearance for
power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the
lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop’s,
cellular phones or other electrical equipment. The con-
sole’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these
compartments.
Cargo Area
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A reversible trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo
area. The rubber side of the mat is used to protect the
interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris. It
provides a nonskid surface to keep cargo from sliding.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control. Press this button to turn on the
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 213
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base ............... 214
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium ........... 215
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 216
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped ........................ 230
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ........................... 232
▫ Oil Change Required .................. 236
▫ Trip Functions ...................... 236
▫ Keyless Go Display — If Equipped ........ 240
▫ Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays
— If Equipped ...................... 241
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)
– If Equipped ....................... 242
▫ Compass Display .................... 242
▫ Navigation — If Equipped .............. 244
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) .......................... 245
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock ................ 251
4
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped .................... 252
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped ................. 252
▫ Operating Instructions —
Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped ........ 252
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio ..... 252
▫ Clock Setting Procedure —
RER/REN Radio ..................... 254
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)....... 256
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 256
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 259
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 262
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 264
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio ...................... 265
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 265
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 271
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 273
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 275
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 276
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5
— If Equipped ........................ 277
▫ Connecting The iPod威 ................. 278
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Using This Feature ................... 278
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . 278
▫ Play Mode ......................... 279
▫ List Or Browse Mode ................. 280
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)
— If Equipped (REN/RER/RES Radios Only) . . 282
▫ System Activation .................... 282
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 283
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode ............................. 283
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 283
▫ Reception Quality .................... 284
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ............. 284
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 286
䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS)
– If Equipped ......................... 287
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™
— If Equipped ........................ 288
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls
— If Equipped ........................ 290
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 292
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 292
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 292
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Radio 13 — Ignition Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Climate Control 14 — Hood Release
3 — Hazard Switch 9 — Heated Seat Switch* 15 — Trunk Release Button
4 — Analog Clock 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Headlight Switch
5 — Electronic Stability Program Off But-
ton* / Traction Control System Off Button*
11 — Ash Tray* * If Equipped
6 — Glove Compartment 12 — Storage Compartment*
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Electronic Speed Control / Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control or Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) is ON.
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Display Area — If Equipped
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional
information.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
warning messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ......................Fuel Saver Indicator
2drivE ........ Vehicle is in Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
4drivE .......... Vehicle is in All Wheel Drive (AWD
tCASE ..................... AWDSystem Fault
gASCAP ............Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Lo tirE ......................LowTirePressure
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ............... OilChange Required
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The
ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving
habits and vehicle usage.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) / All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Displays (Base Cluster)
On vehicles equipped with a Base Instrument Cluster, the
odometer will display “2drivE” when the vehicle is in
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD), and “4drivE” when All Wheel
Drive (AWD) is activated.
If the odometer displays the “tCASE” warning message
after engine start up, or during driving, the AWD system
is not functioning properly and service is required.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) will display “ALL WHEEL
DRIVE” and “REAR WHEEL DRIVE” when the appro-
priate condition exists. The EVIC will display “SERVICE
AWD SYSTEM” if the system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Lo tirE
When the appropriate tire pressure is low, the odometer
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) perform the following pro-
cedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do
not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
7. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
area.
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos-
sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information).
9. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the con-
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the Brake Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not turn on when
the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light
The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indi-
cator Light will turn on when the key in the
ignition switch is placed in the RUN position.
The light should go out with the engine running. The
system will turn this light on continuously while the
engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the
ESP, the BAS or both.
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in acci-
dent.
11. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in the RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, or stays on, or turns on
while driving, then have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
14. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
15. Trip Odometer Button
Trip Odometer Button — Base Cluster
The word ⬙TRIP⬙ will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles (km). A
second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
Trip Odometer Button — Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are ON. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
17. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in the RUN position. A chime will sound if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check.
The Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled
after the bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
19. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
The Vehicle Security Light flashes rapidly
when the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming,
and slowly when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed.
20. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is placed in the RUN
position. This light will also turn on while the
engine is running if there is a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition
through the ACC and RUN positions. The light should
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
23. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first placed in the RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed
(if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it
means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
24. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the RUN position before engine
start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the
ignition from the OFF to RUN position, have the condi-
tion checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
25. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A
single chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
26. Door Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more
door may be ajar.
27. Decklid Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that the
decklid may be ajar.
28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield
washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass display
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
Uconnect™ Phone displays (if equipped)
•
Navigation system screens (if equipped)
•
Audio mode display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Surround Sound modes (if equipped with Driver-
Selectable Surround [DSS])
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status, and Personal Settings.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also functions as a remote sound system con-
trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features). The
SCROLL button also functions as a remote
sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound
System Controls”.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
compass reading and outside temperature, this
screen will display radio and media mode
information depending on which radio is in the
vehicle. Refer to “Remote Sound System
Controls”.
MENU
Button
FUNCTION
SELECT
Button
SCROLL
Button
AUDIO
MODE
Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
•
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In PARK (with
a single chime)
•
Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
•
ECO – Fuel Saver Indicator
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
SERVICE AWD SYSTEM — All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system is not functioning properly and service is
required.
•
Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
•
ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
•
Distance Set — After changing the desired following
distance in the ACC system, this message will display
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
Attention — If the ACC system predicts that its
maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance, this message will flash and a chime
will sound while ACC continues to apply its maxi-
mum braking capacity. When this occurs, you should
immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
ACC Blinded — If the ACC system deactivates due to
performance limiting conditions. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
ACC Unavailable — If the ACC system turns off due
to a temporary malfunction that limits functionality.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
Service ACC — If the ACC system turns off due to an
internal system fault that requires service from an
authorized dealer. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” (if equipped).
•
Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a
single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
•
Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In REVERSE
(with a single chime) — only available on vehicles
equipped with memory seats.
•
Channel # Transmit
•
Channel # Training
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Channel # Trained
•
Clearing Channels
•
Channels Cleared
•
Did Not Train
•
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
•
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
•
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” under “Start-
ing And Operating.”
•
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting
And Operating”)
•
Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
•
Turn To Run (refer to “Remote Starting System” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”)
•
Key Fob Battery Low
•
Service Keyless System
•
Wrong Key
•
Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to
“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”)
•
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
the following procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode
•
Distance To Empty
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion.
•
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
Fuel Saver Mode — On
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
Fuel Saver Mode — Off
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
•
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the
RUN or START position.
•
Display Units of Measure in
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-
tion. (Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Keyless Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Go icon
momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the
new ignition switch position.
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
Refer to “Keyless Go” in “Starting And Operating” for
more information.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
always re-appears.
Keyless Go Display
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays — If
Equipped
Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside
temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined condi-
tions, when the vehicle automatically transitions from
RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following
message for five seconds.
When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to
RWD the EVIC will display the following message for
five seconds.
Refer to “All Wheel Drive — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for more information on the All Wheel
Drive (AWD) system.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) to All Wheel Drive (AWD)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-
mation on the current surround mode.
•
Stereo
•
Video Surround
•
Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC-
TION SELECT button to change surround modes. The
Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
supported by the radio).
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
HOME button to display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
HOME
Button
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the HOME button to exit.
Navigation — If Equipped
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
Compass Variance Map
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but-
ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
Turn-by-Turn Directions
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro-
grammed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices.
“Language”
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lan-
guage selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)”
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Remote Key Unlock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry
and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st
Press, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door
1st Press is programmed, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching
the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s
door opening. You have to touch a passenger Passive
Entry equipped door handle to unlock all doors passively
when Driver’s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, you can use your RKE transmitter
to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings
for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if
equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle”.
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be
selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote
Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or
“OFF” appears.
“Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the
standard intermittent wiper operation.
“Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Headlights On with Wipers” (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
“Delay Turning Headlights Off”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will
tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the RUN
position and the transmission is in the REVERSE posi-
tion. The mirrors will move back to their previous
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
position when the transmission is shifted out of RE-
VERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,”
“30 min.,” or “60 min.” appears.
“AWD System Displays”
When in this display you may select “ON” or “OFF”.
When ON is selected, the EVIC displays the current
mode of the transfer-case. A five second display appears
any time the transfer-case changes from All Wheel Drive
(AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) or from RWD to
AWD. The EVIC also displays the current mode of the
transfer-case when you shift into drive or reverse. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
Uconnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Park Assist System” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the
REVERSE or NEUTRAL position. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Turn-by-Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Display ECO” — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “EN-
GLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
“Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
“SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Passive Entry” — If Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. When ON
is selected, this feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the RKE trans-
mitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “Door Locks/Passive
Entry — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
Analog Clock
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
To Manually Set the Clock
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
Uconnect威 gps — RER Only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
RES Radio
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES/RSC Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code
RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,
RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if
equipped as an option with these radios.
This feature allows an iPod威 to be plugged into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
•
Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
•
It may be necessary to remove the connector pin
protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to
connecting the cable.
•
If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using the provided connection cable to connect an
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
•
The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
•
The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the
list.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK
>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威.IftheRND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
iPod威.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticed.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-
menu list item on the iPod威 then follow the same steps
to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel”.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
NOTE: Dependent on the audio source, the output may
sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-
matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-
round audio if desired.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ in-
cludes the following components for rear seat entertain-
ment:
•
A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
screen features brightness control for optimum day-
time and nighttime viewing.
•
The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest
to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
Opening the Rear Seat VES™
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been
raised to its viewing position.
•
The radio and DVD player controls allow front seat
operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear
seat passengers.
•
A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into
a molded compartment in the center console armrest
upper storage bin.
•
Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen-
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
VES™ Video Screen
VES™ Remote Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
mode will change (i.e. from AM to FM, to Media mode,
etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to operate various radio, media, and
Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to
or start playing songs in playlists, etc., depend-
ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with
UCI).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
VOLUME
Button
AUDIO
MODE
Button
FUNCTION
SELECT
Button
SCROLL
Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left controls the
blower. The control has an OFF posi-
tion and four speed settings. The
blower will remain on until the con-
trol is turned to the OFF position or
the ignition is turned OFF.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Manual Temperature Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Temperature Control
The rotary knob in the center controls
air temperature. Rotate the control to
the left for cooler air temperature and
to the right for warmer air tempera-
ture. Rotating the control to the ex-
treme left provides the coldest setting.
Rotating the control to the extreme
right provides the warmest setting.
Mode Control
The rotary knob on the right controls
airflow distribution. Dots between
each of the mode selections identify
intermediate modes that allow the op-
erator to fine-tune airflow distribu-
tion. The mode settings are as follows:
•
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
•
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
•
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
can be closed to partially block airflow.
•
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
•
Recirculation Control
The mode control knob also controls the recir-
culation feature. You can choose Bi-Level Re-
circulation air outlets, Panel Recirculation air
outlets, or a mix or both while in this mode.
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However,
when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is
re-used. Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle
rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be used to
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn the air conditioning on
and off. When the air conditioning is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
outlets selected with the mode control. Press
this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning.
An indicator in the button will illuminate when compres-
sor operation is selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort
level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the de-
sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
Automatic Temperature Controls
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the air conditioning control button while
in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the
control button to flash three times and then turn off. This
indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request-
ing the air conditioning is not necessary.
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the recirculation con-
trol button will temporarily put the system in
Recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recircula-
tion will cause the indicator in the control button to
illuminate. After 10 minutes, the system will return to
normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn
off.
NOTE:
•
The surface of the climate control panel and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the location of the climate control
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
operation of this system.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
temp/humidity conditions will cause captured inte-
rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility.
For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
modes will cause the indicator in the control button to
blink and then turn off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of blower preferred automatic,
mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred
automatic. This means the operator can override the
blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the blower control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the automatic temperature control
operation chart that follows for details.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
•
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
•
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats.
•
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
can be closed to block airflow.
•
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
•
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
during manual operation only. When the air con-
ditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with the mode control
dial. Press this button a second time to turn off the air
conditioning. An indicator in the button illuminates
when manual compressor operation is selected.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
•
Recirculation Control
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The Recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. An indicator in the button
illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active. You
may use this feature separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil-
ity. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and
then turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 309
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 309
▫ Keyless Go™ ....................... 310
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 311
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) ............................ 312
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 312
▫ After Starting ....................... 314
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 314
䡵 Automatic Transmission ................. 314
▫ General Information .................. 315
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 317
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 317
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override .......................... 318
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission
– If Equipped ....................... 319
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 319
5
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
– If Equipped ....................... 324
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 324
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 328
▫ Operation ......................... 329
䡵 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped ...... 329
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 330
▫ Acceleration ........................ 330
▫ Traction ........................... 331
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 331
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 332
▫ Shallow Standing Water ............... 332
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 334
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 334
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) – 5.7L Engine Only ........... 335
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 335
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System ................. 338
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 340
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 340
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 340
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 341
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ........ 341
▫ Synchronizing ESP ................... 344
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light ............... 344
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 345
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 345
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 349
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 350
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 351
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 355
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 355
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 356
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 358
▫ Radial Ply Tires ..................... 358
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 358
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 359
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 360
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 360
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 361
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 362
䡵 Self-Sealing Tires — If Equipped ........... 363
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 363
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 364
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 365
▫ Base System ........................ 367
▫ Premium System – If Equipped .......... 370
▫ General Information .................. 374
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 374
▫ 2.7L Engine ........................ 374
▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engine ................. 374
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 375
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 375
▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 376
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 377
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 377
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 377
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 378
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 379
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 379
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 381
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 381
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 382
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...... 382
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 382
▫ Overloading ........................ 383
▫ Loading ........................... 383
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 384
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 384
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 386
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ..................... 388
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 388
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 389
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 395
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . 396
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive .... 396
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Go™
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter is in the passenger compart-
ment.
Installing and Removing the ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing the Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing the Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK
position (OFF position for Keyless Go™).
Normal Starting
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
Keyless Go™ Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF
the Brake Pedal Pedal (In PARK or NEUTRAL
Position)
The Keyless Go™ feature operates similar to an ignition
switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps.
•
Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
(Continued)
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
tomatically, dependent upon:
•
Altitude
•
Vehicle loading
•
Driving style
•
Shift lever position
•
Accelerator position
•
Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
NOTE:
•
After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
•
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position
with Keyless Go™) before restarting. Transmission
engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after
restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) first.
•
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
the shift lock will release.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
the key fob is removed from the ignition, the shift
lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave unattended children inside a
vehicle.
Over-Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in the DRIVE position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal
operation.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the
shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Go™). To move the
shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch
must be turned to the ON or START position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin
located to the right of the shift lever. The override access
port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever
gate.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position
(RUN position with Keyless Go™) without starting the
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab
through the access port on the center console.
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the override cover.
Interlock Manual Override
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Keyless Go™ – If Equipped
If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to
turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/
STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN
position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the in-
structions shown above to activate the override.
Four-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is
turned from the LOCK (OFF position with Keyless
Go™) to the ON position (RUN position with Key-
less Go™).
REVERSE
This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis-
sion damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
“D” (Overdrive)
This range is used for most city and highway driving. It
provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the
best fuel economy. Select the “3” range when frequent
transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive
range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing heavy trailers).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into
Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and
shifting operation will resume when the temperature
of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera-
ture. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” later in this section.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
•
If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en-
gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
will resume normal operation.
“3” (Third)
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmis-
sion will operate normally in 1st, 2nd, and 3rd while in
this range. The “3” position should also be used when
descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis-
tress.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup.
“L” (Low)
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than in other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
incline without applying the brakes. These practices
can cause overheating and damage to the transmis-
sion.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usu-
ally after 1–3 miles [1.6–4.8 km] of driving). Because
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever
into the “3” position will show that the transmission is
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
normal condition and it will not cause damage to the
transmission. The torque converter will refill within
five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear
position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. This reset feature allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK.
•
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF
position with Keyless Go™), then start the engine.
•
Shift into DRIVE and resume driving.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diag-
nostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is
turned from the LOCK (OFF position with Keyless
Go™) to the ON position (RUN position with Key-
less Go™).
REVERSE
This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis-
sion damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威/
Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode to select a lower gear.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec-
ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears. To reset the trans-
mission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
If the transmission cannot be reset, see your authorized
dealer.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
AutoStick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with AutoStick威 or Elec-
tronic Range Select (ERS) to provide greater driver con-
trol of automatic transmission operation. Refer to
“AutoStick威” in this section.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) – If Equipped
Electronic Range Select (ERS) allows the driver to limit
the highest available transmission gear, providing you
with more control of the vehicle. ERS allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during mountain
driving, trailer towing, and other situations.
ERS Operation
When the shift lever is in the Drive position, the trans-
mission will operate automatically, shifting between the
five available gears. Moving the shift lever to the left (D-)
will activate ERS, downshift the transmission, and dis-
play the top available gear in the instrument cluster. Once
in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the left (D-) or
right (D+) will change the top available gear. The trans-
mission will not shift above the indicated gear, but will
shift up and down normally (automatically) through the
lower gears. Holding the shift lever to the left (D-) will
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible (with-
out overspeeding the engine) for maximum engine brak-
ing. Holding the shift lever to the right (D+) for a few
seconds will disengage ERS mode.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature
that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more
control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa-
tions.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply
move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in
the DRIVE position. The gear position will display in the
instrument cluster. In the AutoStick威 mode, the transmis-
sion will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is
manually selected by the driver. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen. The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear. Tapping the shift lever to
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift
(D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
To disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
right (D+) for a few seconds. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera-
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick威 mode
(+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended
period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is displayed
momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in the gage area of the vehicle display when the
transmission is first shifted into gear, and if the drive
mode changes during vehicle operation.
NOTE: If the “t CASE” or “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM”
warning message appears after engine start up, or during
driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) (IF
EQUIPPED) – 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
Parking Brake
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations, and
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
All four of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma-
neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ-
ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, at-
tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESP system has two available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
ESP on again, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and
the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will turn off.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF
ESP OFF Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn the ESP on again by momentarily press-
ing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If
this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to
the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction
Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
running.
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on continuously while the engine running if it
detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition switch
cycles, and you have driven the vehicle several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
and the ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
•
Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the ESP system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
•
The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is NORMAL; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in tire over-heating and failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
SELF-SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner
liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in (5 mm) to
minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the
safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob-
ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors, and
•
TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors,
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
•
TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.7L Engine
The 2.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
3.5L and 5.7L Engine
The 3.5L and 5.7L engine is designed to
meet all emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89. The manufacturer recommends the use
of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these en-
gines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold driveability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E85 perform the following:
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E85 fuel.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
Gas Cap Tether Hook
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may
also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE:
•
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
•
Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
tire pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
reational vehicle dealer for additional
information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Indus-
try Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Indus-
try Standards
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.7L & 3.5L Rear Wheel
Drive (RWD) Automatic
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
3.5L All Wheel Drive
(AWD) & 5.7L Automatic
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Re-
fer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Load-
ing Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
tire inflation procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for informa-
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper
inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
a lower gear range using the “3” position (if equipped) or
the AutoStick威/ERS feature (if equipped).
NOTE: Selecting a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
AutoStick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS) – If
Equipped
−
By using the AutoStick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS)
mode and selecting a specific gear range, frequent
shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range should
be selected that allows for adequate performance. For
example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain
the desired speed.
−
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground)
is allowed ONLY if the rear driveshaft is removed and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (for both RWD and
AWD vehicles).
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa-
tion. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 400
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 400
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 401
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ........ 402
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 404
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire ............ 404
▫ Compact Spare Tire ................... 410
▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation
— If Equipped ...................... 410
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 413
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 413
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 415
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 417
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 418
▫ Without The Ignition Key FOB ........... 418
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ............................ 418
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly .................... 419
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel between the center air
outlets.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
Preparations for Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges
and retention teeth.
Center Cap Removal
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
Lug Nut Removal/Installation
1 — Tighten
2 — Loosen
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
Jack Engagement Locations
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
7. Mount the spare tire.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with a center cap or
wheel cover, do not attempt to install it on the compact
spare. However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow
the procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Instal-
lation” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
•
Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation
pressure.
•
This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation — If
Equipped
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped
with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles
equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are
on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the
center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive
force to install the center cap.
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
Remote Battery Posts
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
1 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2 — Remote Positive (+) Post
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spin-
ning the wheels, is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the
rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL.
Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL under the following conditions:
•
The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km).
•
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the
ground (or the rear driveshaft removed) with no limita-
tion on speed or distance.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km)
or faster than 30 mph (48 kph), then the only
approved method of towing is with a flatbed
truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may
result.
•
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be placed in the
RUN position, not the ACC position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.7L ............. 423
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L ............. 424
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L ............. 425
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 426
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap ................. 426
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 427
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 428
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 428
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 429
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 430
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 433
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 433
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 434
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 436
▫ A/C Air Filter ...................... 437
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 439
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 440
7
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 440
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 441
▫ Cooling System ..................... 444
▫ Brake System ....................... 449
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 452
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped ..... 454
▫ Rear Axle .......................... 454
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 455
䡵 Fuses .............................. 460
▫ Integrated Power Module .............. 460
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center .......... 463
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 468
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 468
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 470
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, Inner Park
Lamp, And Outer Park Lamp – 300 Models . . 470
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp – 300C . . . 472
▫ Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, And
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp — 300 Models ....... 472
▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, And
Backup Lamp — 300C Models ........... 476
▫ License Lamp ....................... 479
䡵 Fluid Capacities ...................... 480
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 482
▫ Engine ............................ 482
▫ Chassis ........................... 483
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will appear in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level – 2.7L and 3.5L Engines
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.7L and 5.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
fer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be im-
paired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
Battery Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
the Warranty Information Book, located on the
DVD, for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
2. Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down
and remove the used filter.
Access Door
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
A/C Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer and the headlight washer (if
equipped) share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid
reservoir is located in the front of the engine compart-
ment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for
Keyless Go™). The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in
the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Go™).
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
•
The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
hole.
Fluid Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent
for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and appropriate products such as MOPAR威 Total Clean
or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking
your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Integrated Power Module
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Washer Motor
2 — 25 Amp
Neutral
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
3 — 25 Amp
Neutral
Ignition Run/Start
4 — 25 Amp
Neutral
Alternator/EGR Sole-
noid
5———
6 — 25 Amp
Neutral
Ignition Coils/Injectors/
Short Runner Valve
7———
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
8 — 30 Amp
Green
Starter
9———
10 30 Amp
Pink
— Windshield Wiper
11 30 Amp
Pink
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves – If
Equipped
12 40 Amp
Green
— Radiator Fan
13 50 Amp
Red
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor – If
Equipped
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
14 — — —
15 50 Amp
Red
— Radiator Fan
16 — — —
17 — — —
18 — — —
19 — — —
20 — — —
21 — — —
22 — — —
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Opening The Access Panel
Rear Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
CAUTION!
•
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear
Power Distribution
Center contains a black
IOD fuse needed for
vehicle processing dur-
ing assembly. The ser-
vice replacement part is
a 60 Amp yellow car-
tridge fuse.
2 40 Amp
Green
— Integrated Power Mod-
ule (IPM)
3 ———
4 40 Amp
Green
— Integrated Power Mod-
ule (IPM)
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
5 30 Amp
Pink
— Heated Seats – If
Equipped
6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
7 — 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Heated Seats – If
Equipped
8 — 15 Amp
Blue
Diagnostic Link Connec-
tor (DLC)/Wireless Con-
trol Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
10———
11 * ———
12 * ———
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
13 * ———
14 — 10 Amp
Red
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Security Mod-
ule – If Equipped
15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow Brake Mod-
ule – If Equipped
16———
17 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cluster
18 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Selectable Power Outlet
19 — 10 Amp
Red
Stop Lights
20———
21———
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
22———
23———
24———
25———
26———
27 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC)
28 — 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run, AC Heater
Control/Headlights/
Park Assist – If
Equipped/Tire Pressure
Monitoring – If
Equipped/Occupant
Restraint Controller
(ORC)
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
29 — 5 Amp
Orange
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) – If Equipped/
Cluster/Electronic Sta-
bility Program (ESP) – If
Equipped/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)/
STOP LIGHT Switch
30 — 10 Amp
Red
Door Modules/Power
Mirrors/Steering Con-
trol Module (SCM)
31———
32———
33———
34———
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
35 — 5 Amp
Orange
Antenna Module – If
Equipped/Power
Mirrors/Rain Sensor – If
Equipped
36 — 25 Amp
Natural
Hands-Free Phone – If
Equipped/Video Moni-
tor – If Equipped/Radio
37 — 15 Amp
Blue
Transmission
38 — 10 Amp
Red
Analog Clock/Cargo
Light/Satellite Receiver
(SDARS) Video – If
Equipped/Vehicle Infor-
mation Module – If
Equipped
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
39 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
40 — 5 Amp
Orange
Auto Inside Rearview
Mirror – If Equipped/
Heated Seats – If
Equipped/Switch Bank
41 — 15 Amp
Blue
AWD Module – If
Equipped
42 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Blower Motor
43 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Window Defroster
44 20 Amp
Blue
— Amplifier – If
Equipped/Sunroof – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-
rized dealer. The cluster, the driver seat switch (if
equipped), and the memory module (if equipped) are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11. The
passenger seat switch (if equipped) is fused by the
25 Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The door modules,
the driver power window switch, and the passenger
power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit
breaker in Cavity 13. If you experience temporary or
permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized
dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps ............. W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp ............. 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............578
Visor Vanity Lamps .....................A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped...............194
Door Courtesy .......................... 562
Shift Indicator Lamp ................. JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder ........ LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Exterior (300 Models) Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp..................... 9006
High Beam Headlamp .................... 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp.................... 3157
Front Inner Park Lamp ..................194NA
Front Outer Park Lamp .................. 194NA
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped............PSX24W
Front Sidemarker .......................W5W
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp..................... 3057
Rear Sidemarker ......................... 168
Backup Lamp .......................... 3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL).......LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License................................168
Exterior (300C Models) Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen) .... 9006XS
Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) ................................ D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp .................... 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp ................. 3157AK
Front Fog Lamp ......................PSX24W
Front Sidemarker .......................W5W
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop Lamp .........................3057
Tail Lamp .............................3057
Turn Signal Lamp ...................... 3757A
Backup Lamp .......................... 3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL).......LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Outside Mirror Turn Signal & Approach Lamps . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License .............................. W5W
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp, Inner Park Lamp, and Outer
Park Lamp – 300 Models
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
1 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
2 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Park/Turn Lamp Bulb 4 — Inner Park Lamp Bulb
5 — Outer Park Lamp Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp – 300C
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, and Tail/Stop
Turn Lamp — 300 Models
1. Open the trunk.
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
7. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
1 — Backup Lamp Bulb
2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
11. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
12. Close the trunk.
3 — Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, and Backup
Lamp — 300C Models
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counterclockwise to
remove.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
1 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Tail Lamp Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
3 — Turn Signal Lamp Bulb 4 — Backup Lamp Bulb
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
11. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
12. Close the trunk.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.7 Liter Engine 18 Gallons 68 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 18 Gallons 68 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 19 Gallons 72 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6.0 Quarts 5.7 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 6.0 Quarts 5.7 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7.0 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
9.9 Quarts 9.4 Liters
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Metric
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.4 Quarts 10.8 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
15.1 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 2.7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 2.7L Engine TE10MCC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Fuel Selection – 2.7L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 3.5L and 5.7L En-
gines
87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
Front Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Transfer Case MOPAR威 Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40 or equivalent.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 487
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 489
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All
Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and
3.5L Engines).
❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (2.7L/3.5L Engines).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L
Engines).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All
Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 503
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 507
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 507
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 507
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 507
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 507
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 508
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 508
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 508
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 509
▫ Service Contract ..................... 509
䡵 Warranty Information .................. 510
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 510
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 510
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 510
▫ In Canada ......................... 511
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247–9753
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-485-
2001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .......................335
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ..............338
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 162
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........446
Adding Fuel ........................... 379
Adding Washer Fluid .....................440
Additives, Fuel ......................... 377
Adjustable Pedals ....................... 156
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 433
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 436
Air Conditioning .....................293,295
Air Conditioning Controls ................. 293
Air Conditioning Filter ................. 302,437
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............303
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 436,437
Air Conditioning System .......... 293,295,296,436
Air Pressure, Tires .................... 226,356
Airbag .............................. 56,65
Airbag Deployment ....................... 66
Airbag Light .....................64,69,82,221
Airbag Maintenance .......................68
Airbag, Side ..........................62,65
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 59,62,65
Alarm, Panic ............................25
Alarm (Security Alarm) ................. 18,225
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............18
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................ 329,454
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ................... 283
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 445,446,480
Disposal ............................ 448
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............338,340
Anti-Lock Warning Light .................. 220
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18
Appearance Care ........................ 455
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ......... 18
Assistance Towing ....................... 110
Auto Down Power Windows ................41
516 INDEX
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................34
Auto Up Power Windows ..................41
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 92
Automatic Door Locks ................... 32,34
Automatic Headlights .................... 145
Automatic Oil Change Indicator .......... 219,236
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........296
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives ...................... 453
Automatic Transmission ...........319,324,452,453
Adding Fluid ......................453,483
Autostick ............................ 328
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 453
Fluid Change ......................... 453
Fluid Level Check .....................452
Fluid Type ...........................483
Gear Ranges ....................... 319,324
Overdrive ...........................321
Shifting ..........................319,324
Special Additives ...................... 453
Torque Converter ...................... 322
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . 323,327
Autostick .............................328
Axle Fluid .............................483
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............483
Battery ............................... 434
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ....... 26
Location ............................ 434
Belts, Seat ............................ 46,82
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............439
B-Pillar Location ........................351
Brake Assist System ...................... 341
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 340
Brake Fluid ............................ 483
Brake, Parking ..........................335
Brake System ...........................449
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................... 338
10
INDEX 517
Fluid Check .......................450,483
Master Cylinder .......................450
Parking ............................. 335
Warning Light ........................222
Brakes ............................... 449
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............317
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........80
Brightness, Interior Lights ..................150
Bulb Replacement ..................... 468,470
Bulbs, Light ..........................84,468
Calibration, Compass .....................243
Capacities, Fluid ........................480
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................379
Oil (Engine) ..........................432
Power Steering ........................334
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............... 447
Car Washes ............................ 455
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............81,378
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ................... 381
Cellular Phone ........................ 96,292
Certification Label ....................... 382
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 401
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 347
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ...............427
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............81
Checks, Safety ........................... 81
Child Restraint .................. 71,72,73,76,77
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 74,76
Child Safety Locks ........................37
Clean Air Gasoline .......................375
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 457
Windshield Wiper Blades ................440
Climate Control .........................292
Clock ..................... 251,252,254,257,266
518 INDEX
Coin Holder ........................... 204
Cold Weather Operation ...................312
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............292
Compact Spare Tire ......................358
Compass .............................. 242
Compass Calibration ..................... 243
Compass Variance .......................243
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 236
Connector
UCI ................................277
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........277
Conserving Fuel ........................ 236
Console, Floor ..........................204
Console, Overhead ....................... 189
Contract, Service ........................ 509
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........447
Cooling System .........................444
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 446
Coolant Capacity ...................... 480
Coolant Level ...................... 444,448
Disposal of Used Coolant ................448
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................445
Inspection ...........................448
Points to Remember ....................448
Pressure Cap ......................... 447
Radiator Cap ......................... 447
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......445,480,482
Corrosion Protection ..................... 455
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...........158,162
Cruise Light ...........................216
Cupholders ......................... 203,460
Customer Assistance .....................507
Customer Programmable Features ............ 245
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ........... 150
Daytime Running Lights ................... 147
Dealer Service .......................... 428
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ................ 44
10
INDEX 519
Deck Lid, Power Release ................... 43
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 206
Defroster, Windshield ................83,294,300
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 151
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 426
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 149
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..........................430
Power Steering ........................334
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................... 418
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............448
Engine Oil ........................... 433
Door Locks .............................30
Door Locks, Automatic ....................32
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 190
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ...................330
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................331
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) .... 288
Electric Rear Window Defrost ............... 206
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 94
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 200
Electronic Brake Control System .............340
Anti-Lock Brake System .................340
Brake Assist System ....................341
Electronic Stability Program ...............341
Traction Control System ................. 340
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ....460
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....158,162
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............ 341
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 225
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....230
Emergency Deck Lid Release ................44
520 INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............... 417
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 400
Jacking .............................401
Jump Starting ......................... 413
Overheating ..........................400
Towing ............................. 418
Emergency Trunk Release ...................44
Emission Control System Maintenance ......427,486
Engine .......................... 423,424,425
Air Cleaner .......................... 433
Block Heater ......................... 314
Break-In Recommendations ................80
Checking Oil Level ..................... 430
Compartment ................... 423,424,425
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 444,482
Cooling ............................. 444
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................81,378
Fails to Start ..........................312
Flooded, Starting ...................... 312
Fuel Requirements ..................... 374
Jump Starting ......................... 413
Multi-Displacement .................... 335
Oil ...........................430,480,482
Oil Change Interval ...............219,236,431
Oil Filler Cap .........................432
Oil Filter ............................433
Oil Filter Disposal ..................... 433
Oil Selection .......................431,480
Oil Synthetic .........................433
Overheating ..........................400
Starting .............................309
Temperature Gauge .................... 223
Engine Oil Viscosity ......................432
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 66
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 20
Ethanol ...............................375
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................81,378
10
INDEX 521
Exhaust System .......................81,441
Exterior Folding Mirrors ................... 93
Exterior Lighting ........................ 144
Exterior Lights .......................... 84
Filters
Air Cleaner .......................... 433
Air Conditioning ....................302,437
Engine Oil ........................433,482
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 433
Flashers
Hazard Warning ....................... 400
Turn Signal ...................... 84,148,216
Flash-To-Pass ...........................149
Flat Tire Changing .......................401
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 312
Floor Console ..........................204
Fluid, Brake ...........................483
Fluid Capacities .........................480
Fluid Leaks .............................84
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................. 452
Brake ..............................450
Cooling System .......................444
Engine Oil ........................... 430
Power Steering ........................334
Transfer Case ......................... 454
Fluids ................................ 482
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 482
Fog Lights .......................... 147,216
Folding Rear Seat ........................ 136
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 417
Fuel ................................. 374
Adding ............................. 379
Additives ............................ 377
Clean Air ............................375
Conserving ..........................236
Ethanol ............................. 375
522 INDEX
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................379
Gasoline ............................ 374
Gauge .............................. 225
Materials Added .......................377
Methanol ............................ 375
Octane Rating ......................374,482
Requirements .........................374
Saver Mode .......................... 236
Specifications .........................482
Tank Capacity ........................ 480
Fuel System Caution ..................... 380
Fueling ............................... 379
Fuses ................................460
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........190
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............379,426
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................375
Gasoline (Fuel)
Conserving ..........................236
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 375
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................223
Fuel ...............................225
Odometer ...........................216
Speedometer ......................... 216
Tachometer .......................... 220
Gear Ranges ........................319,324
General Information ............17,27,124,181,374
General Maintenance ..................... 429
Glass Cleaning ..........................459
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 382,385
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............382,384
GVWR ............................... 382
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) .............. 96
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................331
10
INDEX 523
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................400
Head Restraints ......................... 132
Head Rests ............................132
Headlight Washers ....................... 440
Headlights ............................472
Automatic ........................... 145
Bulb Replacement ......................470
Cleaning ............................ 458
Delay ..............................145
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........ 149
Lights On Reminder .................... 147
On With Wipers ....................145,152
Passing .............................149
Switch ..............................144
Time Delay ..........................145
Heated Mirrors .......................... 95
Heated Seats ...........................134
Heater ............................... 293
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 314
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 149
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................ 386
Holder, Coin ........................... 204
Holder, Cup ...........................203
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 190
Hood Release .......................... 142
Ignition ............................... 14
Key............................... 12,14
Ignition Key Removal ..................... 14
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 16
Infant Restraint ........................71,72
Inflation Pressure Tires .................... 226
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 230
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 91
Instrument Cluster .................... 214,216
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 213
524 INDEX
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............459
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............460
Interior Appearance Care .................. 458
Interior Fuses ..........................460
Interior Lights ..........................149
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........151
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ...........................402
Jack Operation .......................... 404
Jacking Instructions ......................404
Jump Starting .......................... 413
Key, Programming ........................ 17
Key, Replacement ........................17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 16
Key-In Reminder .........................15
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keyless Go ....................... 12,240,310
Keys ................................. 12
Kicker Sound System ..................... 287
Knee Bolster ............................ 56
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............148
Lane Change Assist ......................148
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................46
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) ............................ 74,76
Latch Plate .............................48
Latches ................................84
Hood ..............................142
Lead Free Gasoline ......................374
Leaks, Fluid ............................84
Life of Tires ............................361
Light Bulbs .......................... 84,468
Lights .............................. 84,144
Airbag ........................ 64,69,82,221
Anti-Lock ...........................220
10
INDEX 525
Automatic Headlights ................... 145
Brake Assist Warning ................... 344
Brake Warning ........................222
Bulb Replacement ................... 468,470
Courtesy/Reading ...................149,189
Cruise .............................. 216
Daytime Running ...................... 147
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............148,149
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 344
Electronic Throttle Control Warning ......... 225
Engine Temperature Warning ..............220
Exterior .............................. 84
Fog ............................. 147,216
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 400
Headlight Switch ...................... 144
Headlights ........................ 144,472
Headlights On Reminder .................147
Headlights On With Wipers ............145,152
High Beam ........................149,225
High Beam Indicator ....................225
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............. 149
Illuminated Entry .......................20
Instrument Cluster .................. 144,216
Intensity Control ...................... 150
Interior ..........................149,189
License ............................. 479
Lights On Reminder .................... 147
Low Fuel ............................216
LowTire ............................226
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........228
Map Reading ......................149,189
Oil Pressure .......................... 229
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .........150
Passing .............................149
Reading .......................... 149,189
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 225
Service ........................... 468,470
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 228
526 INDEX
SmartBeams ..........................146
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........ 226,365
Traction Control ....................... 344
Turn Signal ...................... 84,148,216
Vanity Mirror ..........................96
Voltage ............................. 228
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 216
Load Leveling System .................... 207
Loading Vehicle ......................381,383
Capacities ...........................383
Tires ...............................351
Locks .................................30
Auto Unlock .......................... 34
Automatic Door ........................ 32
Child Protection ........................37
Door ................................ 30
Power Door ........................... 32
Low Tire Pressure System ..................365
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................74,76
Lubrication, Body ....................... 439
Lumbar Support ........................132
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 434
Maintenance, General ..................... 429
Maintenance Procedures ...................429
Maintenance Schedule ....................486
Maintenance, Sunroof ..................... 199
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 228,427
Manual, Service .........................511
Manual Transmission ..................... 454
Fluid Level Check .....................454
Map/Reading Lights .................. 149,189
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................450
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) .............138
Memory Seat ...........................138
Memory Seats and Radio ..................138
10
INDEX 527
Methanol .............................375
Mini-Trip Computer ......................236
Mirrors ................................91
Automatic Dimming .....................92
Electric Powered ....................... 94
Electric Remote ........................ 94
Exterior Folding ........................93
Heated .............................. 95
Outside ..............................92
Rearview .............................91
Vanity ...............................96
Mode
Fuel Saver ........................... 236
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............365
Mopar Parts .........................428,510
MTBE/ETBE ........................... 375
Multi-Displacement Engine System ...........335
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............148
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 80
Occupant Restraints ...................45,62,66
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .............59,62,65
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 374,482
Odometer .......................... 216,224
Trip ............................. 216,224
Oil Change Indicator ..................219,236
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .............. 219,236
Oil, Engine .........................430,482
Capacity ............................480
Change Interval .................. 219,236,431
Checking ............................ 430
Dipstick .............................430
Disposal ............................ 433
Filter ............................ 433,482
Filter Disposal ........................433
Identification Logo ..................... 431
Materials Added to .....................433
528 INDEX
Recommendation ................... 431,480
Synthetic ............................ 433
Viscosity ......................... 432,480
Oil Filter, Change ........................433
Oil Filter, Selection .......................433
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 426,427
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ........... 190
Operating Precautions .................... 426
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............ 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................92
Overdrive ............................. 321
Overhead Console ....................... 189
Overheating, Engine ................... 224,400
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,511
Paint Care .............................455
Panic Alarm ............................ 25
Park Sense System, Rear ...................184
Parking Brake ..........................335
Passing Light ........................... 149
Passive Entry ........................... 35
Pedals, Adjustable .......................156
Personal Settings ........................ 245
Pets .................................. 80
Phone, Cellular .......................... 96
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) .............. 96
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 351
Power
Deck Lid Release .......................43
Distribution Center (Fuses) ............ 460,463
Door Locks ...........................32
Mirrors ..............................94
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .......... 200
Seats ............................... 130
Steering .............................334
Sunroof .............................196
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 155
Windows .............................40
10
INDEX 529
Power Steering Fluid .....................483
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 55
Preparation for Jacking ....................404
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................53
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 245
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 20
Radial Ply Tires .........................358
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 447
Radio Operation ........................ 292
Radio Remote Controls ....................290
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威 studios) ........... 282
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ................ 153
Rear Cupholder ......................... 203
Rear Park Sense System ...................184
Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 136
Rear Window Defroster ................... 206
Rear Window Features .................... 206
Rearview Mirrors ........................91
Reclining Front Seats ..................... 131
Recreational Towing ...................... 396
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 375
Refrigerant ............................ 437
Release, Hood .......................... 142
Reminder, Lights On .....................147
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 53
Remote Control
Starting System ........................27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 290
Remote Starting System .................... 27
Remote Trunk Release .....................43
Replacement Bulbs .......................468
Replacement Keys ........................ 17
Replacement Parts .......................428
Replacement Tires ....................... 362
530 INDEX
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 510
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ........... 219,236
Restraint, Head .........................132
Restraints, Child .........................71
Restraints, Occupant ...................... 45
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................417
Rotation, Tires .......................... 364
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................82
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............84
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 510
Safety, Exhaust Gas ....................... 81
Safety Information, Tire ................... 345
Safety Tips .............................81
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................283
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威 studios) ........... 282
Schedule, Maintenance ....................486
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 459
Seat Belt Reminder .......................53
Seat Belts ..........................45,46,82
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 51
And Pregnant Women ................... 55
Child Restraint ...................71,72,73,77
Extender .............................55
Front Seat ..........................46,48
Inspection ............................ 82
Operating Instructions ................... 48
Pretensioners .......................... 53
Rear Seat .............................46
Reminder ............................225
Untwisting Procedure ....................52
Seats .................................129
Adjustment ..........................129
Easy Entry ........................... 141
Head Restraints ....................... 132
Heated .............................134
Height Adjustment ..................... 130
Lumbar Support ....................... 132
10
INDEX 531
Memory ............................138
Power .............................. 130
Rear Folding .........................136
Reclining ............................131
Seatback Release .......................136
Tilting .............................. 130
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........445,482
Selection of Oil ......................... 431
Self-Sealing Tires ........................ 363
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 16
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................17
Service Assistance ....................... 507
Service Contract ......................... 509
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................228
Service Manuals ......................... 511
Setting the Clock ............. 251,252,254,257,266
Settings, Personal ........................245
Shifting ............................... 314
Automatic Transmission ............314,319,324
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............51
Shoulder Belts ........................... 46
Side View Mirror Adjustment ................92
Signals, Turn ......................84,148,216
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............330
SmartBeams ........................... 146
Snow Tires ............................ 363
Sound System
Kicker ..............................287
Spare Tire .......................358,359,402
Spark Plugs ............................482
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................ 482
Oil ................................482
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........158,162
Speedometer ........................... 216
532 INDEX
Starting ............................. 27,309
Automatic Transmission ................. 309
Cold Weather .........................312
Engine Fails to Start .................... 312
Remote .............................. 27
Starting and Operating .................... 309
Starting Procedures ...................... 309
Steering
Column Controls ......................148
Column Lock .........................154
Power .............................. 334
Tilt Column ....................... 154,155
Wheel, Tilt ........................154,155
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ......................... 290
Storage ............................204,468
Storage, Vehicle ......................302,468
Storing Your Vehicle ......................468
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 417
Sun Roof .............................. 196
Sunglasses Storage .......................189
Sunroof Maintenance .....................199
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 56
Sway Control, Trailer ..................... 385
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................433
System, Remote Starting ....................27
Tachometer ............................ 220
Telescoping Steering Column .............154,155
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 296
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ....... 223,401
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 74
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Tilt Steering Column ................... 154,155
Time Delay, Headlight ....................145
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........351
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 349
10
INDEX 533
Tire Markings .......................... 345
Tire Safety Information ....................345
Tires ............................ 84,355,513
Aging (Life of Tires) .................... 361
Air Pressure ..........................355
Changing .........................401,404
Compact Spare ........................ 358
Flat Changing ........................ 401
General Information .................... 355
High Speed ..........................358
Inflation Pressures .....................356
Jacking .............................404
Life of Tires .......................... 361
Load Capacity .....................351,352
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........... 365
Quality Grading ....................... 513
Radial .............................. 358
Replacement .........................362
Rotation ............................ 364
Safety ...........................345,355
Self-Sealing .......................... 363
Sizes ............................... 347
Snow Tires ........................... 363
Spare Tire ........................... 402
Spinning ............................360
Trailer Towing ........................ 391
Tread Wear Indicators ................... 360
To Open Hood ..........................142
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 388
Torque Converter Clutch ..................322
Towing ...............................384
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............110
Behind a Motor Home ..................396
Disabled Vehicle .......................418
Guide ..............................388
Recreational ..........................396
Weight ..............................388
Towing Assistance ....................... 110
534 INDEX
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home .........396
Traction Control ......................... 340
Trailer Towing .......................... 384
Cooling System Tips .................... 396
Hitches .............................386
Minimum Requirements .................389
Tips................................395
Trailer and Tongue Weight ............... 388
Wiring ..............................393
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 388
Trailer Weight ..........................388
Transfer Case ........................... 454
Fluid ............................454,483
Maintenance ......................... 454
Transmission ........................... 452
Automatic ...................314,319,324,452
Fluid ............................... 483
Range Indicator ....................319,324
Shifting ............................. 314
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 190
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........20
Transporting Pets ........................80
Tread Wear Indicators ....................360
Trip Odometer ....................... 216,224
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .................... 43,44
Trunk Release, Emergency ..................44
Trunk Release Remote Control ...............43
Turn Signals ......................... 148,216
UCI Connector ......................... 277
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) .............. 96
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 513
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 277
Universal Transmitter .....................190
10
INDEX 535
Unleaded Gasoline .......................374
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............52
Vanity Mirrors ...........................96
Variance, Compass .......................243
Vehicle Certification Label .................382
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 6
Vehicle Loading ................... 352,381,383
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .......................302,468
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 18
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................288
Viscosity, Engine Oil ......................432
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............124
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................. 400
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............216
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information ..................... 510
Washer, Adding Fluid .....................440
Washers, Windshield ..................152,440
Washing Vehicle ......................... 455
Water
Driving Through ...................... 331
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................457
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................457
Wind Buffeting .......................43,199
Window Fogging ........................ 302
Windows ..............................40
Power ............................... 40
Windshield Defroster ................ 83,294,300
Windshield Washers ................... 150,152
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................440
Windshield Wipers ....................... 150
Wiper Blade Replacement .................. 440
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 151
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .................... 153
536 INDEX
Chrysler Group LLC
10C481-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
